Owner`s manual | Chrysler 2009 Automobile User Manual

2009 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s manual
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0954
150920 GrCherokee.indd 1
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
9/9/08 8:33:17 AM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
.............. 8
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform
tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosed
vehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger cars both on-road and
off-road, so take time to become familiar with your
vehicle.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
Section 5 of this manual.
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in
the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the
vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of
all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN label.
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . 24
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Express Down Window Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 38
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 41
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . 42
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 68
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Integrated Ignition Key
The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the RKE
transmitter.
2
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The
valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter, slide
the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out
with your other hand.
Three-Button FOBIK (FOB with Integrated Key)
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in
the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. For details,
refer to “Key Off Power Delay,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignition
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK
or ACC position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the
engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the RKE
transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell
phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause
interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE transmitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electronics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following procedure:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with integrated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle
Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals.
The horn, headlights, and tail lights will sound/flash
repeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is still
present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the headlights and tail lights
will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Set the Alarm
The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
when you use the power door lock switch while the door
is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second
arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will
cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
To Disarm the System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or
turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has
triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door or
use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock any door. They will remain on for about 30 seconds
after all doors are closed then fade to off.
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 30 ft (9 m) using a handheld Remote
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter into the ignition
switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters
will continue to work. Driving the vehicle over 5 mph
disables all RKE transmitter buttons, for all RKE transmitters, until the ignition is turned back to OFF/LOCK.
Three-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lamps with
Lock” under “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in the ⬙Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock” under “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Headlamp Off Delay” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in
Section 4 of this manual.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
Lock,” under “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass
Press the FLIPPER GLASS/TRUNK RELEASE button
two times (the second press within 5 seconds of the first
press) to open liftgate flipper glass.
WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Express Down Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the access door.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to
operate from a normal distance, check for these two
conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
ignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
until you pull up the lock plungers.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Auto
Unlock on Exit” under the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in section 4 of this manual or see
your authorized dealer.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever
a door is opened.
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
Refer to “Auto Door Locks” under “CustomerProgrammable Features” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this manual or see
your authorized dealer.
Child Protection Door Lock
The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child
Protection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on the
open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside
of the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the
Child Protection Door Locks.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.
Child Protection Door Lock
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch has
an “Auto Down” feature. Press the window switch past
the first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the “Auto Down” movement,
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Resetting the Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
2
Pull the window switch up and close the window completely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the window lockout button again.
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
WARNING!
To avoid injury, stand back when opening. Glass may
automatically rise.
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
Liftgate Glass Release
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and
window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to
a window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbags to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a
poor driver and cause a collision which includes
you. This can happen far away from home or on
your own street.
• Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued)
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Latch Plate to Buckle
(Continued)
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have
it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack from Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS
on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use Automatic Locking mode anytime a child safety seat
is installed in the rear center seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is fully extended.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
they must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt
Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlert威 will be
reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more
than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Reminder Light to turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbags to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
2
This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the
driver, and front and rear passengers sitting next to a
window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.
Window Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the window bag.
The area where the window bag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during
inflation.
(Continued)
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbags to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts
to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Control (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) determines if
a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe enough to
require the front and/or side airbags to inflate. The
front airbag inflators are designed to provide different
rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the
ORC. The ORC will detect roll overs, not rear impacts.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light for 2.5 to 8 seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound if the light comes on again after initial start
up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
are possible, based on collision severity and occupant
size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The
bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side or rollover
collisions. When the Occupant Restraint Control
(ORC) detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle, and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is
sensed. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3 in (8 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) detects a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and
front passenger, and then to immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. The hazard
lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine.
In addition, after the vehicle has stopped moving, the
interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain
lit until the ignition switch is turned off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
• Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six
to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned
on,
• Remains on after the six to eight second interval, or
• Flickers, or comes on and remains on for any period of
time while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse
block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in Section 7 of this
manual. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to one-quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment
or near-deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an
airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
unavailable.
NOTE:
• A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant
airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
• Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Otherwise required by law.
• Transmission gear selection
Data parameters that may be recorded:
• Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Traction/stability control status
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used
in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or
death to infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler LLC also recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary). For the second row center seat belt
with the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt from
the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. For
additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking
Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
to
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction, are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are
older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System”.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage
bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate
the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you
are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap
to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight,
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough
allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is
fully extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle
whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer
are required for proper installation of a child restraining device. In the event of an accident, or under
severe vehicle maneuvers, leaving the subwoofer
unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or
fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle.
Tether Strap Mounting
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 81
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 78
䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped . . 80
▫ uconnect威 phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect威 phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 118
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 110
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . 116
▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Automatic Headlight System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 133
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . 134
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . 140
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 144
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 158
▫ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . 150
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Rear Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off — With
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off —
Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Front Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 174
3
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
3
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside Automatic
Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with outside automatic dimming mirrors, they will operate when the inside automatic dimming mirror is on. The outside mirrors operate
off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust
for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror
does.
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Power Mirror Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this Section for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this Section for further information.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To access a n illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instructions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone.
NOTE:
• The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
Version 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for
supported phones.
For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons (PHONE
Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button) that will
enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
3
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
pairing instructions:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automatically downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威
website for supported phones.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
• To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect威 phone.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellular phone is accessible.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
• The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect威 phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
uconnect姞 phone Features
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is
using:
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cell phone directly.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play
the current confirmation prompt status and you will
be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
• The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞
phone
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say
your command.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and
say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands
The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting
for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once you
are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the driver’s seat (all models) and on
the left side of the passenger’s seat (if equipped). Moving
the lumbar control lever forward and rearward will
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Manual Lumbar Control
Power Seat Switches
Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward,
and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback
recline adjustment.
Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim.
The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
High as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button which must be pushed in to lower the head
restraint to all positions. The restraints may be raised
without pushing in the button.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the heater/air
conditioning controls). The heaters provide the same
average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from a
High or Low heat setting. Illuminated LEDs on each
switch indicate the level of heat in use.
two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting
will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off. Two indicators will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact with each
other and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS
ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position
(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position (if
equipped).
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off. Two indicators will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting
will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact with each
other and potential seat overheating, always ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position
(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position (if
equipped).
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)
to release.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE: Do not fold the rear seat down with the center
seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in an accident. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
Folding Rear Seat
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage (Rear Seat Armrest) — If Equipped
The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage
armrest.
Armrest Storage Latch
Rear Seat Armrest
Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the
storage bin.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
position. The memory system can accommodate up to
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
Driver Memory Switches
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory
2. Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you
are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2
if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system
will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to
complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
mirror to the desired positions.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
driver’s door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
Customer-Programmable Features” in Section 4 for more
information.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s
mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
2. Press and release memory button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
on the driver’s door.
4. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
1 on the driver’s door.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under ⬙Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerProgrammable Features⬙ in Section 4 for more
information.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
available:
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
driving position when the key is placed into the
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
the ACC/ON position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable
Features⬙ in Section 4 for more information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left,
and lift the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation. Turn to the third detent for AUTO
headlight operation (if equipped).
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, passing light, interior
courtesy/dome lights, and optional fog lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent
to activate the automatic headlight system.
This system performs two functions. With the engine
running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and off based on the
surrounding light levels.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
section.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Instrument Panel and Interior Lights” for setting the instrument panel lights to full daytime intensity.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SmartBeams — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced, the SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
1. Select “Auto Headlamp Low/High Beams? — Low/
High Beam.” Refer to “EVIC — Customer-Programmable
Features” in Section 4 of this manual.
2. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
headlight position.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
To Deactivate
1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually
deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the
system to function improperly.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity
level whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain
on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC, or
the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must
be used for normal nighttime driving.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel and Interior Lights
When the multifunction lever is in the parking light,
headlight, or AUTO position (if equipped), rotating the
center portion of the lever up and down will increase and
decrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instrument panel lights. Full daytime brightness on all electronic displays (odometer, overhead console, radio, and
Automatic Climate Control (if equipped) is obtained by
rotating the center portion of the control to the first
detent above the dimmer range. Rotating the control to
the second detent above the dimmer range turns the
interior lights on. Rotating the control to the “Off”
(extreme bottom) position disables all the interior lights,
even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the
“Off” position the instrument panel lighting is at the
lowest light level and may not be suitable for night
driving.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Battery Saver Feature
If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light
position, parking light position, or the headlight position
when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position,
the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the
exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normal
operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or
when the headlight switch is turned to another position.
turn lights, low beam headlights, or Auto headlights and
pull out the end of the multifunction lever. A light in the
instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on.
3
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
switch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located in the multifunction
lever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/
Front Fog Light Control
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog
lights.
• A front fog light is a lighting device that provides
illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of
fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supplement the lower beam of a standard headlight system.
• Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights
should be made to prevent excessive glare for other
drivers.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down, and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to
show proper operation of the left and right turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the
multifunction lever partially up or down.
Turn Signal Control
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multifunction lever once, and the turn signal (left
or right) will flash three times and automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
High Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the
multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on
until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60,
or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To
activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must
be rotated to the “Off” position after the ignition switch
is turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) – Customer-Programmable
Features” in Section 4 to turn this feature “On/Off” or set
the time interval.
High Beam/Low Beam Select
Interior Lights
The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights (below the
instrument panel), an overhead console light (which
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
contains both driver and passenger reading lights), reading lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargo
light. Opening a door, pressing the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or turning
the center of the multifunction control lever to the
extreme up position, will activate all interior courtesy
lights.
Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time. There are also reading lights located
above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these
lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second
time.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a
switch in the right side control lever. Turn the end of the
control lever to select Low, High, or one of the five speed
sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds. Refer to
“Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System” in this
section. For information on the rear wiper and washer,
refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of
the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired
delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a
cycle every 1/2 second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position.
• The rain sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerProgrammable Features” in Section 4 of this manual.
The rain sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the rain sensing system will not
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the rain sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt Steering Column
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in
actuating the pedals.
WARNING!
3
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals
forward (away from the driver).
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is
ON. A message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked
out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse”). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) in Section 4 for more information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal’s
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L engines; and 14 mph
(23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines.
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (5 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L, and 3.0L diesel engines).
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L
engines, and 14 mph (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is on,
push down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can be
increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L, and 3.0L diesel engines) speed
increase. Each time the lever is tapped, speed increases so
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
switch ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle
SET speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning
Section and Note Section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist will remember the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is changed to the ON position.
The Rear Park Assist can be active only when the shift
lever is in REVERSE. If the Rear Park Assist is enabled at
this shift lever position, the system will be active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h) or above. The system will be active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12
to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location and
orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the
warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about
one second. Each side of the warning display has six
yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the
obstacle when the red LED is ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
8th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
59 in (150 cm)
51 in (130 cm)
45 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
28 in (70 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
12 in (30 cm)
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Yes, Half Second
None
None
None
None
None
Yes, Intermittent
Yes, Continuous
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist
The Rear Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with a
switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel.
When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. When the
shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
message.
The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the
Rear Park Assist is disabled or defective. The Rear Park
Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled.
Rear Park Assist Switch
Service The Rear Park Assist
When the Rear Park Assist is defective, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles with a uconnect威 tunes radio may be equipped
with a rearview camera (located on the rear liftgate) that
allows you to see an on-screen image (on the navigation
radio screen) of the rear of your vehicle, whenever the
vehicle is put into REVERSE.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Camera system
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear
Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
(Continued)
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera system
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camera
system.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — With
Navigation Radio
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — Without
Navigation Radio
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
again.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof
switches.
3
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
3
POWER OUTLETS
Front Power Outlet
To the left and right of the convenience tray (lower center
of instrument panel) is an outlet for electric-powered
accessories. Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to
access the outlet.
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped
The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left
rear cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery and
will receive power whether the ignition is in the ON or
LOCK position. All accessories connected to this outlet
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not
in use to protect the battery against discharge.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115-Volt, 150-Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current.
Power Inverter
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools. Due to built-in overload protection, the
power outlet will shut down if the power rating is
exceeded. Each device to be powered should be checked
first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet’s 150 Watts
maximum rating.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the power inverter switch (located on the upper
switch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the
switch again to turn the power off.
NOTE:
• When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the inverter will
shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
Power Inverter Switch
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
CUPHOLDERS
In the center console, there are two cupholders for the
front seat passengers.
3
Rear Cupholders
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Front Cupholders
The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that
pull out from the lower center of the rear seat.
Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever to the extreme top position. If all
doors are closed and only the liftgate is open, pushing on
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lamps.
Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the
interior lights to normal operation.
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear storage compartment is located on the driver’s
side behind the second row seat.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
In an accident, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Rear Cargo Cover
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Cargo Load Floor
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic
lined tray which holds a variety of items.
3
Cargo Load Floor
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
1. Flip up pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
parallel to the slotted hole in tray.
3. Lift the tray over the loop(s), and reposition the tray.
4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push the loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the
top of the tray.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the on position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear
window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the
rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,
the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to be
turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this
happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “Park”.
Rear Window Defroster
Press this button (located on the Climate Control
panel) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated side mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the
button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is on. The defroster automatically turns off after
about 10 minutes of operation.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
• Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar威 crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The optional crossbars must be installed using the correct
orientation (the longer crossbar toward the front).
The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the
seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the
siderails to prevent movement. To move the crossbars,
loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of
each crossbar approximately eight turns, then move the
crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars
parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in one of
the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to
lock the crossbar into position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front crossbar in the second detent
from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in
the last detent closest to the rear of the vehicle.
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle
when not in use.
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . 182
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 193
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 198
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 208
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 216
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 218
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER/REN) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 226
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 234
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 235
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 245
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES
Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 253
䡵 uconnect studios威 (Sirius Backseat TV™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Video Entertainment System™ (Sales Code
XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Automatic Temperature Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
- Air Outlet
- Instrument Cluster
- Radio
- Glove Compartment
5
6
7
8
-
Upper Switch Bank
Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
Storage Bin
Power Outlet
9 - Lower Switch Bank
10 - Climate Controls
11 - Ignition Switch
12 - Storage Bin
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – GASOLINE ENGINE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL ENGINE
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
chime if the turn signals are left on for more than one
mile (2 km).
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
6. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
8. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM).
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
9. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
10. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” later in this section.
15. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
HAUL button is located in the center of the
instrument panel (below the climate controls).
16. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
17. 4WD LOW Indicator — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to ⬙Occupant
Restraints/Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威)⬙ in Section 2 for more information.
19. Cruise Indicator
This indicator lights when the speed control
system is turned ON.
20. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
21. Shift Lever Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
shift lever selection.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
22. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
23. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
24. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
25. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
26. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on, and a single chime will
sound, when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. The
Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again,
especially during and after hard braking, accelerations,
or turns. This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the
tank.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
27. Glow Plug Indicator Light — Diesel Only
This light will illuminate when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON position. Wait
until the light turns off before starting the
vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in Section 5 of this manual.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Personal Settings, and System Status.
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select
the displayed function YES (Y) or NO (N).
SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), and System Status Messages.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE Button
Press
and
release
the
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• PROGRAMMING ACTIVE — NEW KEY PROGRAMMED
• TURN SIGNAL ON
• LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• PERFORM SERVICE
• X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• DAMAGED KEY — KEY DOES NOT COMMUNICATE
• LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — KEY NOT PROGRAMMED
• WRONG KEY — KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO
VEHICLE
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PROGRAM LIMIT
• SERVICE SECURITY KEY
• DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON
• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF
• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• PARK ASSIST DISABLED
• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• SERVICE SUSPENSION
• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
• LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP
• LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE
• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)
• 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL
• COOLANT LOW (with graphic)
• LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
• OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
• WARNING! LIMIT SPEED
• OIL CHANGE RESET
• CHECK GASCAP
• CHECK GAUGES
• ESP OFF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
• IOD FUSE OUT
• HILL DESCENT CONTROL
• MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET
• MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT BUCKLED (with graphic)
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK
• LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• DRIVER 1 MEMORY
• SPARE LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
• DRIVER 2 MEMORY
• WATER IN FUEL (Diesel Models Only)
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL SET
• SERVICE EXHAUST (Diesel Models Only)
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE
• RKE BATTERY LOW
• LOW TIRE PRESSURE
• VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
• CHECK TPM SYSTEM
• IGNITION POSITION
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• PRESS BRAKE TO START
• INSERT KEY
• TURN TO ON
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required (Gasoline Engines Only)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Service Distance
• Display Units of Measure In
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Display Units of Measure In
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and hold
the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds. Current
display will reset along with other functions
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to display
one of eight compass readings and the outside
temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
calibrated. To complete the calibration process, drive
slowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles
in an area, free from magnetic material until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The Compass
will now function normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
the compass variance must be set using the following
procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
change the variance number. Continue until desired
number is reached.
5. Press either MENU, SCROLL, or COMPASS/TEMP
button to set the value and exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” is
displayed in the EVIC.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the uconnect威 gps (if equipped). Press the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect威 language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection” in
the uconnect威 phone section of this manual for details.
Auto Door Locks
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lock
automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or
NO (N) appears.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
“Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press”
appears.
Sound Horn with Lock
When YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occur
when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y)
or NO (N) appears.
Flash Lamps with Lock
When YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signals
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the “Sound Horn with Lock” feature. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Automatic High Beams (Available with SmartBeam
Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
“Lights/SmartBeams — If Equipped” in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
When YES (Y) is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts to
the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Service Interval
Diesel Models — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a service interval between
2,500 to 12,500 miles (4 000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles
(1 000 km) increments may be selected. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button to select distances between 2,500 to 12,500 miles (4
000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles (1 000 km) increments.
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected, the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver
Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more
information.
Hill Start Assist
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, uconnect威 phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
Display Units of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and uconnect威 gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC”
appears.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
System Status
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
• System OK
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires.) For additional information,
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in Section 5 of
this manual.
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in Section 5 for additional information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Tire Pressure Display
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
REQ Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
• The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For uconnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) – IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your uconnect威 tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect威 gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using
the provided interface cable.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect威. For sales code
RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI
feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s
Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option
with these radios.
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connecting the cable.
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the optional connection cable to connect an
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
• The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the ‘AUX’ button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod威 and display data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this
button at any other time in the track it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 - Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to following this warning could result in an
accident.
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 studios
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
uconnect studios姞 (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —
IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat TV™ offers three video channels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios.
powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to your
VES™ User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions.
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.
4
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™ (SALES
CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a battery-
Lowering the Display Screen
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Control Location
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System —
If Equipped
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
4
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Controls
The instrument panel features four dual-vane airflow
registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of
the instrument panel and two are located in the center of
the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to
partially block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct
airflow where the occupant desires.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
The blower control rotary knob (on the
left) controls the blower and can be set
to one of four speeds, and OFF. The
blower fan motor will remain on until the system is turned to the OFF
position or the ignition is turned
OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
The temperature control rotary knob
(in the center) controls the air temperature. The coldest temperature setting is on the extreme left and the
warmest setting on the extreme right
of the rotation. The knob can be positioned at any point on the dial.
Mode Control
The mode control rotary knob (on the
right) can be placed in several positions. Dots between each of the mode
selections identify intermediate modes
that allow the occupants to fine tune
airflow distribution.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered
to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
maintained.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
delivered to defrost while in the floor mode so that
comfort can be maintained.
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air
flows through the registers in the back of the center
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to partially
block airflow. The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation
The recirculation feature can be selected with
the mode control knob. You may choose between Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel Recirculation air outlets while in this mode. Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when
in “Recirculation” mode air inside the vehicle is re-used.
Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle.
The “Recirculation” mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control
at any speed and press the snowflake button
located on the control panel. Conditioned air will
be directed through the outlets selected by the mode
control. A light in the snowflake button shows that the air
conditioning is on.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
The Automatic Temperature Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the
driver and passenger.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO
position should be used when more airflow is desired, or
when rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort
setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating
the driver’s or passenger’s control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
Automatic Temperature Controls
NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent
a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO,
and not the actual air temperature.
Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, and
then turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either
LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF (O) position on the blower control knob stops the
system completely.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. However, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs
are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air
temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
respectively. With the temperature setting in these positions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort
control.
Air Conditioning
The air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will
cause the LED to flash three times and remain off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting
the air conditioning is not necessary.
Recirculation
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing this button will temporarily put the system in “Recirculation”
mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. This will cause the LED to illuminate.
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
of this system.
• To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
• Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
normal operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pressing the “Recirculation” button. However, under certain conditions in automatic the system
is blowing air out of the defrost vents. When these
conditions are present, and the “Recirculation” button
is pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. This
tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation
mode at this time. If you would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first move your mode knob to
Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the “Recirculation” button. This feature will reduce the possibility
of window fogging.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature
Control, and Manual. This means the customer can
override the blower, mode, and disable the Automatic
Temperature Control completely.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart below for details.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a
temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full
counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full
hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is
set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic
control of air temperature is disabled. The user must
adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected.
It must be manually selected, when desired.
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered
to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
maintained.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that comfort
can be maintained.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air
flows through the registers in the back of the center
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while
the floor outlets deliver heated air.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Air Conditioning
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off during manual operation only. Conditioned outside air is then directed through the
outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
is selected.
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
Recirculation
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The “Recirculation” mode should
only be used temporarily. The button includes
an LED that illuminates, which indicates that the “Recirculation” mode is active. You may use this feature
separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the “Recirculate” button to return to outside
air. Some temperature/humidity conditions will cause
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
“Recirculation” mode to be selected while in the defrost
or defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
blink and then turn off.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper
coolant type.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly
for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan
speed.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 287
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Five–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 288
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Normal Starting — Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Quadra-Trac I威 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . 296
5
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Quadra-Trac II威 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . 297
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Quadra-Drive II威 System — If Equipped . . . . 301
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . 315
▫ TSC (Trailer Sway Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4WD Models With
NV245 Two–Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . 320
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
▫ HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD Models
With NV245 Two–Speed Transfer
Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Tire Safety Information
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . 338
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 345
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 337
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ 3.7 And 4.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 363
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 357
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Fuel Requirements (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . 360
䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Towing – 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Towing — Quadra-Trac I威 (Single-Speed
Transfer Case) 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Towing — Quadra–Trac II威 /Quadra–Drive
II威 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
5
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
Tip Start
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them
carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
• Low Oil Pressure Light is off.
Cold Weather Precautions
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
require special considerations. The following chart suggests these options.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Normal Starting — Diesel Engines
Observe the following when the engine is operating.
• All message center lights are off.
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel (ULSD) should only
be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F/-23°C)
exist.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
NOTE:
• Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1
ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in
fuel economy.
• Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2
ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels, which reduces the temperature at which wax crystals form in
fuel.
NOTE: This engine requires the use of “Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel.” Use of incorrect fuel could result in
exhaust system damage. Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in
this section for further details on fuel recommendations.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For the same decrease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
power to crank at the same RPM. The use of battery
blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low
temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are available
from your authorized MOPAR威 dealer.
Engine Starting Procedure
WARNING!
NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle.
This could result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in the instrument
cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in Section 4 of this
manual. It will glow for two to ten seconds or more,
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
depending on engine temperature. When the “Wait To
Start” goes out, the engine is ready to start.
4. Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key (FOBIK) to briefly turn the ignition switch to the
START position and then release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will automatically disengage
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 20 seconds. The
starter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to
the OFF position, if required.
5. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to
circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below
0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful to
your engine because combustion chamber temperatures
can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold.
When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to
operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to
stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE: High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept
under 1,200 RPM during the warm-up period, especially
in cold ambient temperature conditions.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine
at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are
applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below
0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful to
your engine because combustion chamber temperatures
can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Stopping The Engine
Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, always allow
the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for
several seconds. This assures proper lubrication of the
turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any
period of hard driving.
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown.
After full load operation, idle the engine three to five
minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will
allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
components, and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbocharged, charge air cooled engines.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater cord to
a ground-fault interrupter protected 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to
have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.7L/4.7L Engine — coiled and strapped to the engine
oil dipstick tube.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
• 5.7L Engine — bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
• 3.0L Diesel Engine — on the passenger side of the
vehicle, mounted on a stud between the fresh airbox
and coolant reservoir.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the key to the ON position without starting the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK.
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover, which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
4. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
Interlock Manual Override
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
PARK
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
DRIVE
Shift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a complete
stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The transmission
automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit
the highest available gear. For example, if the driver
shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can shift
down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.
NOTE:
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left
(-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear
that can be attained without overrevving the engine.
The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and
will limit the top gear to the one displayed.
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the right
(+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode
and shift to the appropriate gear. The display will read
⬙D⬙.
3.7L and 3.0L Diesel Engine
When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-),
will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For
example, if you are in DRIVE and are in 5th gear, when
you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
transmission will downshift to 4th gear and the display
will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the
transmission into 3rd gear.
4.7L and 5.7L Engine
On vehicles equipped with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, use of
ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional
underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. ERS 1,2, and 3 are
underdrive gears; ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive)
is the same as the normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE
position in 1st through 4th gear, the first tap to the left (-),
will display the ERS designation for the current gear (the
transmission will not downshift). For example, if you are
in DRIVE and are in 3rd (direct) gear, when you tap the
shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4
(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift
the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive
gear). When in the DRIVE position in 5th gear, the first
tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and
display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal 4th gear). Another
tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS
4 (direct gear).
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
5*
1-5
D
1-5
* Applies to vehicles equipped with 4.7L/5.7L engines
only.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (5th gear for 3.7L and 3.0L diesel
engine, 4th and 5th gears for 4.7L and 5.7L engines). The
transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive, if the
following conditions are present:
• the transmission selector is in DRIVE;
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h);
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
• transmission
temperature.
has
reached
normal
operating
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warmup time of
the engine and transmission.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After cool down, the transmission will
resume normal operation.
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled
under steady cruise conditions.
In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by
a downshift, may occur. The TOW/HAUL light will turn
off. This is a normal part of the overheat protection
strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL mode.
5
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the
most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully
depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
(56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode — If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL” indicator light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the transmission limp home mode
will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission will
remain in the current gear (3.7L and 3.0L diesel engine) or
in direct gear (4.7L and 5.7L engines) until the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Only 2nd gear (3.7L and 3.0L diesel engine) or 3rd
gear (4.7L and 5.7L engines) will be available in the
DRIVE position. Have the transmission checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The
feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift
control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive
gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles
with 4.7L or 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive
gears), the transmission may not shift into the top
Overdrive gear (normal 5th gear) until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm.
• If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
Rocking The Vehicle
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and
Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF
before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in Section 3 of this manual.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine, is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between
“First” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I姞 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I威 is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four–
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control System (BTC), which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I威 system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Quadra-Trac II姞 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II威
transfer case provides three mode positions — 4WD HI,
NEUTRAL, and 4WD LOW.
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shift Positions
Shifting Procedures
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
4WD HI to 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and raise the transfer case T-handle. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster,
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete. Release the T-handle.
4WD HI
All roads surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dry
hard pavement.
NEUTRAL
Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 of
this manual.
4WD LOW
Low speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
exists, a “CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will
flash from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster,
will flash and go out when the shift is complete. Release
the T-handle.
Shifter T-Handle
4WD LOW to 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and raise the transfer case T-handle. The
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will flash
from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Key ON, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The lamp will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will flash from
the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Quadra-Drive II姞 System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II威 System features three
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include ELSD
(Electronic Limited-Slip Differential) front and rear axles
and Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case. The optional ELSD
axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions, the units
function as standard axles, balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels. With a traction difference
between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a
speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than
the other, torque will automatically transfer from the
wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction.
While the transfer case and axle couplings differ in
design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac
II威 transfer case shifting information, preceding this
section, for shifting this system.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners, and can
be removed by hand.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING!
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), or
other types of power steering fluids, when servicing
the power steering system of this vehicle. Damage to
the power steering system can result from the use of
the wrong power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
The power steering system requires the use of
MOPAR威Hydraulic System Power Steering (P/N
05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
NOTE: The Brake Warning Light indicates only that the
parking brake is applied. It does not indicate the degree
of brake application.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces.
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
• Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the shift lever. Do
not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), and
ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with TSC (Trailer Sway
Control) and, if it has 4WD with the NV245 two-speed
transfer case, HSA (Hill Start Assist) and HDC (Hill
Descent Control).
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING!
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)” in this section for more
information.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) for a complete explanation of the available ESP
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESPequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has three available operating modes in
4WD HIGH range, two available operating modes on
2WD vehicles, and one operating mode in 4WD LOW
range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
High Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGH
range and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH
range, the ESP system will be in this “On” mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” mode
for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion
of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on
again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. This
will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
5
ESP OFF Switch
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
Full Off (4WD Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light
will illuminate, and the “ESP OFF” message will appear
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in Section 4 of this manual for more information.
In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP system shuts off. ESP
is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not
interfere with off-road driving, but ESP function returns
to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). The ESP/TCS Indicator Light will always be
illuminated when ESP is off. To turn ESP on again,
momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. This will
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display, and the
audible chime will sound, when the shift lever is placed
in the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. The “Full Off” ESP mode is intended for
off-road use only.
4WD Low Range
Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESP system will be in this “Full Off” mode. In 4WD LOW
range, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, are turned off until the
vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
(64 km/h), the normal ESP stability function returns but
TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below
35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP system shuts off. ESP is
deactivated at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW range so
that it will not interfere with off-road driving but ESP
function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds
above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESP/TCS Indicator Light
will always be illuminated in 4WD LOW range when ESP
is off.
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display, and the
audible chime will sound, when the shift lever is placed
in the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. The “Full Off” mode is intended for offroad use only.
TSC (Trailer Sway Control)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in Section 5 of this manual. When
TSC is functioning, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESP system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4WD Models With NV245
Two–Speed Transfer Case Only)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 8% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing with HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of
this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD Models With
NV245 Two–Speed Transfer Case Only)
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during off-road driving situations and is available in
4WD LOW range only. To enable HDC (transfer case
must be in 4WD LOW range), press the HDC switch. If
the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in
4WD LOW range, the light in the switch will flash for five
seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
5
Hill Descent Switch
When HDC is properly enabled, the message “HILL
DESCENT CONTROL” will appear in the EVIC and the
light in the switch will be illuminated. HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed
when necessary. HDC has the capability to sense terrain
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a
hill. It will usually not activate on level ground.
The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
• 1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• 2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)
• 4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
• 5th = 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
• REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• PARK = HDC will not function
HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain, and
will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed
(about 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) than normal.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the
usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.
At vehicle speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), HDC will no
longer function. When the vehicle speed drops below
30 mph (48 km/h), HDC function will automatically
resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/
BAS Warning Light and the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster both come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
They should both go out with the engine running.
If the ESP/BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system, or both. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• ⬙The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS
Warning Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was previously turned off.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage it.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
5
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the indicators appear in
two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your
tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Certain models have sufficient tire-to-body clearance to
allow use of tire chains. Install chains on rear tires only.
Follow these recommendations to guard against damage
and excessive tire and chain wear:
• Do not install tire chains or traction devices on vehicles with larger than P235/65R17 tires. Tires larger
than this may not provide sufficient body clearance
with chains or other traction devices.
• Use SAE class “S” tire chains or traction devices only.
• Follow tire chain manufacturer’s instructions for
mounting chains.
• Install chains snugly and tighten after 0.5 mile (1 km)
of driving.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h), unless otherwise
specified by the chain manufacturer.
• Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes and
extreme driving maneuvers.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in
Section 8 of this manual. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning message to appear, or the chime to sound.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. In addition, a “CHECK TPM
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 seconds when
a system fault is detected, and a chime will sound. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition
no longer exists. A system fault can occur by any of the
following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
ON, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, and
a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none
of the road tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, a
“TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON. After
driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message
will be displayed for 75 seconds. For each subsequent
ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, a “CHECK
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 seconds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will set the “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message, but it will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three
seconds, and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
5
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
CHECK TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for three seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the
pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for three seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to the trigger component. In this
case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed by a graphic display, with pressure values still
shown. This indicates the pressure values are still being
received from the TPM Sensors. However, the system still
needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
ON, a chime to sound, a Low Pressure message to
appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display will still
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
show the low tire pressure value “flashing.” Driving
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below
the low pressure warning threshold. The EVIC will
also display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message,
and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value
in place of the “flashing” low tire pressure value.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and
the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7 and 4.7L Engine
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are designed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer if the
gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore,
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS (DIESEL ENGINES)
NOTE: Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15
ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel, meeting
ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15, will provide good
performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold
(below 20° F or -7° C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods,
use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel
fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel
filters.
This vehicle is fully-compatible with biodiesel blends
up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975.
WARNING!
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Label
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel-blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel
fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from
the fuel/water separator using the provided fuel/water
separator drain. If you buy good quality fuel and follow
the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area,
a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved
cold-starting and warm-up performance.
for information on features that are common between
Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique,
yellow fuel filler cap (gas cap) that states Ethanol (E-85)/
Unleaded Gasoline, and by the FLEXFUEL badge that
will be located on the body of your vehicle. This section
only covers those subjects that are unique to these
vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual
E-85 Fuel Cap
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap)
can operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 mi (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline, the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of
this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0° to 32°F (-18° to 0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Replacement Parts
All components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
DO NOT put gasoline in your diesel vehicle (if
equipped). If you accidentally put gasoline in your
vehicle, DO NOT start the engine. This will cause
damage to the fuel system. Have the fuel system
flushed.
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
• Replacing fuel system components with nonethanol compatible components can damage your
vehicle.
• Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in
your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weightdistributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required
depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading
to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Model
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
3.7L
3.7L
4.7L
4.7L
4.7L (w/
Trailer Tow
Group IV)
4.7L (Laredo/
Limited)(w/
Trailer Tow
Group IV)
5.7L
5.7L
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
4x2
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
11,400 lbs (5 170 kg)
40
40
40
40
60
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
350 lbs (159 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
650 lbs (295 kg)
4x4
11,500 lbs (5 215 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
650 lbs (295 kg)
4x2
4x4
12,300 lbs (5 578 kg)
12,300 lbs (5 578 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
sq
sq
sq
sq
sq
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
(3.72
(3.72
(3.72
(3.72
(5.57
sq
sq
sq
sq
sq
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
m)
m)
m)
m)
m)
3,500
3,500
3,500
3,500
6,500
lbs
lbs
lbs
lbs
lbs
(1
(1
(1
(1
(2
587
587
587
587
948
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
3.0L Diesel
(Limited)
3.0L Diesel
(Overland)
3.0L Diesel
4x2
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
64 sq ft (5.95 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
4x2
12,250 lbs (5 556 kg)
64 sq ft (5.95 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
4x4
12,250 lbs (5 556 kg) 64 sq ft (5.95 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
720 lbs (327 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue
load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing
cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,200 lbs
(1 451 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case
is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight).
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” for proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
− An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronicallyactuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7–pin
wiring harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness
and connector.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7-Pin Connector
4-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a
lower gear range while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if
you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
(4.7L and 5.7L engines).
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Towing – 2WD Models
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Towing — Quadra-Trac I姞 (Single-Speed Transfer
Case) 4WD Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. This model does not
have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case.
Towing — Quadra–Trac II姞 /Quadra–Drive II姞 4WD
Models
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL
position, and the transmission must be in the PARK
position for recreational towing.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)
for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts
to blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Neutral Switch
5. Start the engine.
6. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no
vehicle movement.
8. Shut the engine off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Place the ignition key in the OFF position, and
remove key.
11. Apply the parking brake.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Transmission damage may occur if the transmission
is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer case
in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to
shifting the transmission into PARK (refer to steps 7
and 8 above).
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)
for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts
to blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop
blinking (go out) when shift is complete. The “4WD
SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer be
displayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Neutral Switch
5. Shift the transmission into PARK.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
clash.
CAUTION!
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 400
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ 2–Wheel Drive Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ 4–Wheel Drive Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the Hazard Warning flasher switch
is activated, all directional turn signals will flash
on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may run down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm, level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the passenger side compartment, behind the second
row seat.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
CAUTION!
• The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
• When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end
of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
6
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown. Connect
jack handle driver (1) to two extensions (2), then to the
lug wrench (3).
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front axle, place it
under the front lower control arm as shown. For the rear
axle, place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed.
Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when
jacking on the rear axle. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Assembling Jack Tools
1 — Jack Handle Driver
2 — Extensions
3 — Wrench
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.
NOTE: A tire should be stowed with the “beauty” side
up. Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching
or damage to the wheel face. Continue winching up the
tire until you hear the winch “ratchet” three times.
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
12. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area.
JUMP-STARTING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
carefully.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12-Volt system, i.e.
Do not use a 24-Volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets, which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the transmission in PARK, and turn
the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection, and personal
injury could result.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent.
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious
injury.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
2–Wheel Drive Models Only
Provided the transmission is operable, tow only in NEUTRAL at speeds not exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h), for
distances of not more than 15 miles (24 km). Towing at
more than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 15 miles
(24 km), can cause severe transmission damage. If the
transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), remove the driveshaft or tow with all
four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
4–Wheel Drive Models Only
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Engine Compartment – 4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 410
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Maintenance After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . 436
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . 455
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 458
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
7
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module
6 — Battery
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 4.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Power Distribution Center
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
7 — Battery
8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
9 — Engine Oil Fill
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Air Cleaner Filter
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Power Distribution Center
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Engine Oil Fill
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.0L DIESEL
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Distribution Center
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module
Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and drivability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “CHECK GASCAP” message
will be displayed in the EVIC (Refer to Section 4 of this
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
manual). Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
The message will remain displayed until the vehicle
diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will
perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle
was keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature and
the following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outside
temperature. It may be possible to have a message that
will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low
outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the
problem is gone, the message will disappear.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. See
your authorized dealer for service.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
WARNING!
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
3.0L Diesel Engine Only
Before checking the engine oil level, turn the engine off
and wait 15 minutes to allow for the oil to return to the oil
pan.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
3.0L Diesel Engine Only
Anytime the oil is drained and filled it is very important
to wait 15 minutes before starting the engine.
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engines
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Selection - Diesel Engines
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-11106, or
Mercedes Benz MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 and ACEA C3
qualified engine oils
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.0L Diesel Engine)
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technology Diesel Engine and an emission device designed
to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being
released into the atmosphere. The durability of your
engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate
filter emission device is highly dependent on the use
of the correct engine oil.
SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high-quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance interval.
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post, and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and (-) negative and identified on the
battery case.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
(Continued)
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tuneup to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance interval.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than the
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze)
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
(-37°C) are anticipated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove
the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be periodically inspected.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance interval.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly-closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
WARNING!
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be 1/2 inch (1 cm) below the oil fill
hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for correct fluid type.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Automatic Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for correct fluid type. It is important
that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for correct fluid type.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check (3.7L and 3.0L Diesel Engine)
Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or shift lever malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check (4.7L and 5.7L Engine)
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard, or conceal
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
Maintenance After Off-Road Driving
After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or
similar dirty conditions, have your brake discs, brake
linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from
causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,
change all lubricants, and lubricate body components, all driveline joints and steering linkage more
often than in normal service, to prevent excessive
wear.
After driving off-road, completely inspect the underbody
of your vehicle. Check the tires, body structure, steering,
suspension and exhaust system for damage. Check
threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.
Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the
CAUTION!
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover, if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Fuse Panel
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES
Interior Fuses
The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to
the left of the steering column.
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
30 Amp
Audio Amp (B+)
Green
15 Amp
Sunroof (B+)
Blue
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Htd Mirror (EBL)
Cavity
10
Rr Pwr Out (B+)
Rr HVAC (R/O)
(Commander Only)
Door Locks (B+)
Pwr Outlet (B+)
11
12
13
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
10 Amp
Final Drive Control
Red
Module (FDCM),
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC), Rear Heated
Seat Switch, O/H,
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC) Relay, Rear
Park Assist
Spare (B+)
10 Amp
Door Mods, O/H
Red
Lamps, IP Courtesy
Lamps, Glove Box
Lamp (B+)
10 Amp
Autowipe (R/A)
Red
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Cavity
14
15
16
17
19
20
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Spare
(R/S)
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cigar Ltr (R/A)
Tire Pressure Transponders (R/O)
Upper & Lower
Switch Bank, Diag.
Connector, Cluster
(B+)
Flipper Glass (B+)
Cavity
21
22
24
25
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM),
Cluster (R/S), BUX
Trailer Tow
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
Spare
(Acc Delay)
15 Amp
Rear Wiper (B+)
Blue
10 Amp
Power Distribution
Red
Center (PDC) Relays,
Powertrain Control
Module, A580 (R/S)
10 Amp
Shifter Assy (BTSI),
Red
Trans. Case Switch,
ESP/ABS, Trailer
Sway Damp Relay
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Power Distribution Center
Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
ity
Fuse
1
50 Amp
PTC Heater 1 (Diesel
Red
Only)
Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
ity
Fuse
2
40 Amp
HID Headlamps
Green
3
50 Amp
PTC Heater 2 (Diesel
Red
Only)
4
30 Amp
Power Outlets
Pink
5
50 Amp
PTC Heater 3 (Diesel
Red
Only)
6
30 Amp
Cig Lighter, Trail Tow
Pink
Batt
7
40 Amp
Power Liftgate (ComGreen
mander Only)
8
40 Amp
Starter, JB Power
Green
9
20 Amp
Front Power Windows
Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
ity
Fuse
10
—
Spare
11
40 Amp
HVAC Blower
Green
12
30 Amp
Rear Wiper, Ign R/O
Pink
13
40 Amp
Rear Window DeGreen
froster (EBL)/Heated
Mirror
14
30 Amp
Rear HVAC (If
Pink
Equipped)
15
—
Spare
16
50 Amp
ASD
Red
17
30 Amp
ABS Pump
Pink
Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
ity
Fuse
18
40 Amp
Accessory Delay, Seats
Green
19
40 Amp
JB Power
Green
20
30 Amp
Wiper Motor
Pink
21
20 Amp
Fuel Pump
Yellow
22
20 Amp
TCM, A/C Clutch
Yellow
23
25 Amp
Power Inverter
Natural
24
20 Amp
Rear Heated Seats
Yellow
25
20 Amp
Final Drive Control
Yellow
Module (FDCM)
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
15 Amp
Brake Lamps
Blue
20 Amp
HD Washer (If
Yellow
Equipped) (Export
Only)
30 Amp
ABS Valves
Green
20 Amp
PCM Batt (Gasoline
Yellow
Only)
—
Spare
—
Spare
15 Amp
Powertrain Control
Blue
Module (Diesel Only)
20 Amp
Final Drive Control
Yellow
Module (FDCM)
E-Diff
Cavity
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
—
Description
Spare
Trail-Tow Mod (Export Only)
Spare
Ignition Switch
HID Left
HID Right
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Injectors
Subwoofer (SRT Only)
Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cavity
43
44
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
25 Amp
Coils, Actuators
Natural
—
Spare
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
Cavity
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
Integrated Power Module
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Lt Park Lamps
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
Rt Park Lamps
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #4
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #2
Adjustable Pedal
Ft Fog Lamps
Horn
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
27
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #1
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #3
Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
MOD
Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1
Cavity
28
29
30
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/S
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/O
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module
labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
Visor Vanity Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlights (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Headlights (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
1 — High Beam Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
1 — High Beam Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Light
1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog light bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lights
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
2 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb
3 — Back-Up Light Bulb
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the
housing.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
light assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL
housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.7/4.7/5.7L Gasoline Engines
3.0L Diesel Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, API Certified
Low Ash)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
U.S.
Metric
21 Gallons
22 Gallons
79 Liters
83 Liters
5 Quarts
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
10 Quarts
4.7
5.7
6.6
9.5
Liters
Liters
Liters
Liters
12.7 Quarts
11.8 Liters
14 Quarts
13.2 Liters
15.2 Quarts
14.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
16.7 Quarts
15.8 Liters
13.9 Quarts
13.2 Liters
15.3 Quarts
14.5 Liters
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil (3.0L Diesel Engine)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-11106, Mercedes Benz MB
229.31 or 229.51, and ACEA C3 qualified engine oils.
Oil Filter (3.7L Engine)
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05184231AA) or equivalent
Oil Filter (4.7L and 5.7L Engine)
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent
Oil Filter (3.0L Diesel Engine)
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05175571AA) or equivalent
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine)
ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine)
Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm]) Lower Bank — FR8T1332
(Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine)
LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Component
Fuel Selection (3.7L and 4.7L Engine)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine)
Fuel Selection (3.0L Diesel Engine)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. The
manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use
of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round service, No.
2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20F or
-7C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel
fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification
D-975.
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case (NV140 Single Speed
Only)
Transfer Case (NV245 Two Speed
Only)
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 NV 247/245 Transfer Case Lubricant
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent with friction modifier additive.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
This system requires the use of MOPAR威 Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid (P/N 05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material
Standard MS-10838.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 462
▫ Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine . . 462
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine . . . . 476 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
A
I
N
T
E
N
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if A
N
required.
C
E
Once a Month
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or S
C
damage.
H
E
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under ”Electronic Vehicle
Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals D
U
as required.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
L
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake E
master cylinder, power steering and transmission S
8
(4.7L and 5.7L only) and add as needed.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Oil Change
Required Maintenance Intervals
• Change the engine oil filter.
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be change every 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 M
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or
24 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
(4.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and
5.7L Engines).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 M
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or
48 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
T 54 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
T 78 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
96 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
T 102 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Engine).
❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs
(4.7L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
Change the transfer case fluid.
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
T 126 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475 M
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
(4.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and
5.7L Engines).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine
To help you have the best driving experience possible,
the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle maintenance service intervals that are required to keep your
vehicle operating properly and safely.
Chrysler LLC recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at your selling dealer. The technicians
at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have
access to factory trained information, genuine MOPAR威
parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical
tools that can help prevent future costly repairs.
The maintenance intervals shown should be performed
as indicated in this section.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months,
whichever comes first.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 15 minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 M
A
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter/ I
N
water separator unit.
T
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
Required Maintenance Intervals
C
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following H
E
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 6,250 Miles (10,000 km) or
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E
N Schedule
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
12,500 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M
18,750 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing.
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 31,250 Miles (50,000 km) or
T 30 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
43,750 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of
the following: Dusty or off-road
conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Rotate tires.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
56,250 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 62,500 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
C
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
68,750 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 M
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
81,250 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 87,500 Miles (140,000 km) or
T 84 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
the following: Dusty or off-road
conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
93,750 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 M
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
WARNING!
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a
N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
A
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
C
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 492
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 490
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 490
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
9
488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
9
490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
9
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
9
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
9
496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
498 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 417
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,71,186
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,187
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,312
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 20
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 264
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,433
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
INDEX 499
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
294
290
163
163
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,312
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 68
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,450
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 364
. . 307
. . 427
. . 437
69,359
. . 168
. . 167
. . 167
10
500 INDEX
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,260
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59,64,66
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,223,227,236
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 247
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INDEX 501
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 425
. . . . . . . . . . . . 424
. . . . . . . . . . . . 429
. . . . . . . . . . . . 427
. . . . . . . . . . . . 427
. . . . . . . . . 425,456
. . . . . . . . . . . . 191
. . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 257
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10
502 INDEX
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 163
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 144
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 192
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,193
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 411,462
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407,408,409
Compartment Identification . . . . . . 406,407,408,409
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,456
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,456
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
INDEX 503
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 54
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359,422
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,422
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Finish Care . . . . . . .
Flashers . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
417
417
417
437
390
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,185,452,454
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,362
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 458
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
10
504 INDEX
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,365,367
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,366,410
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,26,110,355
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,370
INDEX 505
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,369
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,450
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,120
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
372
167
154
129
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,15
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,184
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
10
506 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,394
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
18
17
17
21
14
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,130
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,71,186
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
INDEX 507
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,137
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 325
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 192
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,451
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,134
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 185
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,153
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 185
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10
508 INDEX
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,130,136,452,454
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,476
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 185,411
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
INDEX 509
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,492
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,191
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,411
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,390
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,493
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10
510 INDEX
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 331
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 163
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,297
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite (uconnect gps)
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
. . . . . . . . . . . . 252,257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
INDEX 511
Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 383
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 385
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 258
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
10
512 INDEX
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Satellite Radio (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . 252,257
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,476
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 41
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,66
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,120
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,187
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
INDEX 513
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,223,227,236
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,136,185,452,454
Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . 257
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,339,392
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,280
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,285
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,448
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10
514 INDEX
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 264
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 331
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,335,494
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
INDEX 515
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,401
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,433
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 154
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10
516 INDEX
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,185,452,454
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444,447
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 247
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,367
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,448
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,421
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,162
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INDEX 517
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2009 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s manual
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0954
150920 GrCherokee.indd 1
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
9/9/08 8:33:17 AM
Download PDF

advertising